• Home
  • Line#
  • Scopes#
  • Navigate#
  • Raw
  • Download
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 
27 #define WLAN_EID_HT_INFORMATION  61
28 /**
29  * DOC: Introduction
30  *
31  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
32  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
33  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
34  * drivers.
35  */
36 
37 #ifdef IPV6_FILTERING
38 #include <linux/in6.h>
39 #endif /*IPV6_FILTERING*/
40 
41 /**
42  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
43  *
44  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
45  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
46  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
47  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
48  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
49  * tasklet function.
50  *
51  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
52  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
53  */
54 
55 /**
56  * DOC: Warning
57  *
58  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
59  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
60  */
61 
62 /**
63  * DOC: Frame format
64  *
65  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
66  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
67  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
68  * hardware.
69  *
70  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
71  *
72  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
73  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
74  *
75  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
76  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
77  */
78 
79 /**
80  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
81  *
82  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
83  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
84  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
85  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
86  *
87  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
88  * suspend.
89  *
90  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
91  *
92  */
93 
94 /**
95  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
96  *
97  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
98  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
99  * between different stations/interfaces.
100  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
101  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
102  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
103  *
104  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
105  * driver operation.
106  *
107  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
108  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
109  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
110  *
111  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
112  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
113  *
114  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
115  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
116  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
117  *
118  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
119  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
120  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
121  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
122  * ieee80211_return_txq().
123  *
124  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
125  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
126  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
127  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
128  * .release_buffered_frames().
129  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
130  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
131  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
132  */
133 
134 struct device;
135 
136 /**
137  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
138  *
139  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
140  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
141  */
142 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
143 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
144 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
145 };
146 
147 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
148 
149 /**
150  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
151  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
152  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
153  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
154  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
155  */
156 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
157 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
158 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
159 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
160 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
161 };
162 
163 /**
164  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
165  *
166  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
167  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
168  *
169  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
170  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
171  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
172  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
173  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
174  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
175  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
176  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
177  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
178  */
179 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
180 	u16 txop;
181 	u16 cw_min;
182 	u16 cw_max;
183 	u8 aifs;
184 	bool acm;
185 	bool uapsd;
186 	bool mu_edca;
187 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
188 };
189 
190 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
191 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
192 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
193 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
194 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
195 };
196 
197 /**
198  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
199  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
200  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
201  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
202  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
203  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
204  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
205  */
206 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
207 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
208 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
209 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
210 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
211 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
212 };
213 
214 /**
215  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
216  *
217  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
218  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
219  *
220  * @def: the channel definition
221  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
222  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
223  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
224  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
225  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
226  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
227  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
228  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
229  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
230  */
231 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
232 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
233 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
234 
235 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
236 
237 	bool radar_enabled;
238 
239 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
240 };
241 
242 /**
243  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
244  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
245  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
246  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
247  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
248  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
249  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
250  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
251  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
252  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
253  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
254  *      for changes/removal.)
255  */
256 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
257 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
258 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
259 };
260 
261 /**
262  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
263  *
264  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
265  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
266  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
267  * done.
268  *
269  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
270  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
271  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
272  */
273 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
274 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
275 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
276 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
277 };
278 
279 /**
280  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
281  *
282  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
283  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
284  *
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
286  *	also implies a change in the AID.
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
288  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
290  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
292  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
294  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
296  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
297  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
298  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
303  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
304  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
306  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
308  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
309  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
310  *	changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
312  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
313  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
314  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
315  *	context had been assigned.
316  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
319  *	keep alive) changed.
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
322  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
323  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
324  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
325  *
326  */
327 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
328 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
357 #ifdef IPV6_FILTERING
358 	BSS_CHANGED_NDP_FILTER		= 1<<29,
359 #endif /*IPV6_FILTERING*/
360 
361 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
362 };
363 
364 /*
365  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
366  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
367  * filtering will be disabled.
368  */
369 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
370 
371 #ifdef IPV6_FILTERING
372 /*
373  * The maximum number of IPv6 addresses listed for NDP filtering. If the number
374  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware NDP
375  * filtering will be disabled.
376  */
377 #define IEEE80211_BSS_NDP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
378 #endif /*IPV6_FILTERING*/
379 
380 
381 /**
382  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
383  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
384  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
385  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
386  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
387  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
388  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
389  */
390 enum ieee80211_event_type {
391 	RSSI_EVENT,
392 	MLME_EVENT,
393 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
394 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
395 };
396 
397 /**
398  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
399  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
400  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
401  */
402 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
403 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
404 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
405 };
406 
407 /**
408  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
409  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
410  */
411 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
412 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
413 };
414 
415 /**
416  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
417  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
418  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
419  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
420  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
421  */
422 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
423 	AUTH_EVENT,
424 	ASSOC_EVENT,
425 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
426 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
427 };
428 
429 /**
430  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
431  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
432  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
433  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
434  */
435 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
436 	MLME_SUCCESS,
437 	MLME_DENIED,
438 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
439 };
440 
441 /**
442  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
443  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
444  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
445  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
446  */
447 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
448 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
449 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
450 	u16 reason;
451 };
452 
453 /**
454  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
455  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
456  * @tid: the tid
457  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
458  */
459 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
460 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
461 	u16 tid;
462 	u16 ssn;
463 };
464 
465 /**
466  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
467  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
468  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
469  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
470  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
471  * @u:union holding the fields above
472  */
473 struct ieee80211_event {
474 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
475 	union {
476 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
477 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
478 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
479 	} u;
480 };
481 
482 /**
483  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
484  *
485  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
486  *
487  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
488  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
489  */
490 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
491 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
492 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
493 };
494 
495 /**
496  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
497  *
498  * @lci: LCI subelement content
499  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
500  * @lci_len: LCI data length
501  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
502  */
503 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
504 	const u8 *lci;
505 	const u8 *civicloc;
506 	size_t lci_len;
507 	size_t civicloc_len;
508 };
509 
510 /**
511  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512  *
513  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515  *
516  * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
517  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
518  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
519  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
520  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
521  *	ACK, BACK or both
522  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
523  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
524  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
525  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
526  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
527  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
528  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
529  * @assoc: association status
530  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
531  *	or not
532  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
533  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
534  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
535  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
536  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
537  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
538  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
539  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
540  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
541  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
542  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
543  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
544  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
545  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
546  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
547  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
548  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
549  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
550  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
551  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
552  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
553  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
554  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
555  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
556  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
557  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
558  *	the current band.
559  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
560  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
561  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
562  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
563  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
564  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
565  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
566  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
567  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
568  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
569  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
570  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
571  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
572  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
573  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
574  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
575  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
576  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
577  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
578  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
579  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
580  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
581  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
582  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
583  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
584  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
585  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
586  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
587  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
588  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
589  *	your driver/device needs to do.
590  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
591  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
592  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
593  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
594  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
595  * @txpower: TX power in dBm
596  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
597  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
598  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
599  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
600  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
601  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
602  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
603  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
604  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
605  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
606  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
607  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
608  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
609  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
610  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
611  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
612  *	station.
613  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
614  *	responder functionality.
615  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
616  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
617  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
618  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
619  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
620  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
621  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
622  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
623  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
624  * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
625  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
626  */
627 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
628 	const u8 *bssid;
629 	u8 bss_color;
630 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
631 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
632 	bool uora_exists;
633 	bool ack_enabled;
634 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
635 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
636 	bool he_support;
637 	bool twt_requester;
638 	bool twt_responder;
639 	/* association related data */
640 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
641 	bool ibss_creator;
642 	u16 aid;
643 	/* erp related data */
644 	bool use_cts_prot;
645 	bool use_short_preamble;
646 	bool use_short_slot;
647 	bool enable_beacon;
648 	u8 dtim_period;
649 	u16 beacon_int;
650 	u16 assoc_capability;
651 	u64 sync_tsf;
652 	u32 sync_device_ts;
653 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
654 	u32 basic_rates;
655 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
656 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
657 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
658 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
659 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
660 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
661 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
662 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
663 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
664 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
665 	int arp_addr_cnt;
666 	bool qos;
667 	bool idle;
668 	bool ps;
669 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
670 	size_t ssid_len;
671 	bool hidden_ssid;
672 	int txpower;
673 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
674 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
675 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
676 	u16 max_idle_period;
677 	bool protected_keep_alive;
678 	bool ftm_responder;
679 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
680 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
681 	bool nontransmitted;
682 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
683 	u8 bssid_index;
684 	u8 bssid_indicator;
685 	bool ema_ap;
686 	u8 profile_periodicity;
687 	struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
688 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
689 #ifdef IPV6_FILTERING
690 	struct in6_addr ndp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_NDP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
691 	u8 ndp_addr_cnt;
692 	bool ndp_filter_enabled;
693 #endif /*IPV6_FILTERING*/
694 };
695 
696 /**
697  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
698  *
699  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
700  *
701  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
702  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
703  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
704  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
705  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
706  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
707  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
708  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
709  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
710  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
711  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
712  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
713  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
714  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
715  *	station
716  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
717  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
718  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
719  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
720  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
721  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
722  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
723  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
724  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
725  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
726  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
727  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
728  *	hardware queue.
729  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
730  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
731  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
732  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
733  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
734  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
735  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
736  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
737  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
738  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
739  *	off-channel operation.
740  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
741  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
742  *	it can be sent out.
743  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
744  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
745  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
746  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
747  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
748  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
749  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
750  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
751  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
752  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
753  *	queue gets full.
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
755  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
756  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
757  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
758  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
759  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
760  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
761  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
762  *	status to user space)
763  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
764  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
765  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
766  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
767  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
768  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
769  *	handled properly by the device.
770  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
771  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
772  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
773  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
774  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
775  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
776  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
777  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
778  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
779  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
780  *	PS-Poll responses.
781  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
782  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
783  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
784  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
785  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
786  *	monitor injection).
787  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
788  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
789  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
790  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
791  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
792  *
793  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
794  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
795  */
796 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
797 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
798 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
799 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
800 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
801 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
802 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
803 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
804 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
805 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
806 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
807 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
808 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
809 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
810 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
811 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
812 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
813 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
814 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
815 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
816 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
817 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
818 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
819 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
820 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
821 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
822 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
823 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
828 };
829 
830 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
831 
832 /**
833  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
834  *
835  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
836  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
837  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
838  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
839  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
840  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
841  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
842  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
843  *
844  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
845  */
846 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
847 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
848 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
849 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
850 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
851 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
852 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
853 };
854 
855 /*
856  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
857  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
858  */
859 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
860 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
861 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
862 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
863 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
864 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
865 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
866 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
867 
868 /**
869  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
870  *	Rate Control algorithm.
871  *
872  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
873  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
874  *
875  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
876  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
877  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
878  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
879  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
880  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
881  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
882  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
883  *	Greenfield mode.
884  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
885  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
886  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
887  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
888  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
889  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
890  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
891  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
892  */
893 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
894 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
895 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
896 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
897 
898 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
899 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
900 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
901 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
902 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
903 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
904 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
905 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
906 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
907 };
908 
909 
910 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
911 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
912 
913 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
914 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
915 
916 /* maximum number of rate stages */
917 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
918 
919 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
920 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
921 
922 /**
923  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
924  *
925  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
926  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
927  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
928  *
929  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
930  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
931  *
932  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
933  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
934  *
935  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
936  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
937  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
938  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
939  * information::
940  *
941  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
942  *
943  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
944  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
945  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
946  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
947  * information should then contain::
948  *
949  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
950  *
951  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
952  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
953  */
954 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
955 	s8 idx;
956 	u16 count:5,
957 	    flags:11;
958 } __packed;
959 
960 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
961 
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)962 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
963 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
964 {
965 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
966 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
967 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
968 }
969 
970 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)971 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
972 {
973 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
974 }
975 
976 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)977 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
978 {
979 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
980 }
981 
982 /**
983  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
984  *
985  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
986  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
987  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
988  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
989  *
990  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
991  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
992  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
993  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
994  * @control: union part for control data
995  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
996  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
997  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
998  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
999  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1000  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1001  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1002  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1003  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1004  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1005  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1006  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1007  * @pad: padding
1008  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1009  * @status: union part for status data
1010  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1011  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1012  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1013  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1014  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1015  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
1016  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1017  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1018  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1019  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1020  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1021  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1022  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1023  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1024  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1025  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1026  */
1027 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1028 	/* common information */
1029 	u32 flags;
1030 	u8 band;
1031 
1032 	u8 hw_queue;
1033 
1034 	u16 ack_frame_id;
1035 
1036 	union {
1037 		struct {
1038 			union {
1039 				/* rate control */
1040 				struct {
1041 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1042 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1043 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1044 					u8 use_rts:1;
1045 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1046 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1047 					u8 skip_table:1;
1048 					/* 2 bytes free */
1049 				};
1050 				/* only needed before rate control */
1051 				unsigned long jiffies;
1052 			};
1053 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1054 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1055 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1056 			u32 flags;
1057 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1058 		} control;
1059 		struct {
1060 			u64 cookie;
1061 		} ack;
1062 		struct {
1063 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1064 			s32 ack_signal;
1065 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1066 			u8 ampdu_len;
1067 			u8 antenna;
1068 			u16 tx_time;
1069 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1070 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1071 		} status;
1072 		struct {
1073 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1074 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1075 			u8 pad[4];
1076 
1077 			void *rate_driver_data[
1078 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1079 		};
1080 		void *driver_data[
1081 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1082 	};
1083 };
1084 
1085 /**
1086  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1087  *
1088  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1089  * @info: Basic tx status information
1090  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1091  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1092  */
1093 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1094 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1095 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1096 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1097 	struct rate_info *rate;
1098 };
1099 
1100 /**
1101  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1102  *
1103  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1104  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1105  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1106  *
1107  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1108  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1109  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1110  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1111  */
1112 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1113 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1114 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1115 	const u8 *common_ies;
1116 	size_t common_ie_len;
1117 };
1118 
1119 
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1120 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1121 {
1122 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1123 }
1124 
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1125 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1126 {
1127 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1128 }
1129 
1130 /**
1131  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1132  *
1133  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1134  *
1135  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1136  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1137  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1138  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1139  *
1140  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1141  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1142  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1143  */
1144 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1145 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1146 {
1147 	int i;
1148 
1149 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1150 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1151 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1152 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1153 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1154 	/* clear the rate counts */
1155 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1156 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1157 
1158 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1159 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1160 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1161 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1162 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1163 }
1164 
1165 
1166 /**
1167  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1168  *
1169  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1170  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1171  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1172  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1173  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1174  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1175  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1176  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1177  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1178  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1179  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1180  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1181  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1182  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1183  *	de-duplication by itself.
1184  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1185  *	the frame.
1186  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1187  *	the frame.
1188  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1189  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1190  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1191  *	merging.
1192  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1193  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1194  *	(including FCS) was received.
1195  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1196  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1197  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1198  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1199  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1200  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1201  *	each A-MPDU
1202  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1203  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1204  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1205  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1206  *	on this subframe
1207  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1208  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1209  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1210  *	done by the hardware
1211  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1212  *	processing it in any regular way.
1213  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1214  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1215  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1216  *	monitor interfaces.
1217  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1218  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1219  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1220  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1221  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1222  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1223  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1224  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1225  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1226  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1227  *	interleaved with other frames.
1228  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1229  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1230  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1231  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1232  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1233  *	the first subframe.
1234  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1235  *	be done in the hardware.
1236  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1237  *	frame
1238  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1239  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1240  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1241  *
1242  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1243  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1244  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1245  *	 - DATA5_GI
1246  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1247  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1248  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1249  *
1250  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1251  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1252  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1253  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1254  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1255  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1256  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1257  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1258  */
1259 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1260 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1261 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1262 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1263 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1264 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1265 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1266 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1267 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1268 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1269 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1270 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1271 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1272 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1273 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1274 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1275 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1276 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1277 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1278 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1279 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1280 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1281 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1282 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1283 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1284 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1285 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1286 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1287 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1288 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1289 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1290 };
1291 
1292 /**
1293  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1294  *
1295  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1296  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1297  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1298  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1299  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1300  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1301  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1302  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1303  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1304  */
1305 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1306 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1307 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1308 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1309 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1310 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1311 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1312 };
1313 
1314 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1315 
1316 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1317 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1318 	RX_ENC_HT,
1319 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1320 	RX_ENC_HE,
1321 };
1322 
1323 /**
1324  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1325  *
1326  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1327  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1328  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1329  *
1330  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1331  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1332  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1333  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1334  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1335  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1336  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1337  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1338  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1339  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1340  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1341  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1342  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1343  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1344  *	values were filled.
1345  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1346  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1347  * @antenna: antenna used
1348  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1349  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1350  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1351  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1352  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1353  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1354  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1355  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1356  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1357  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1358  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1359  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1360  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1361  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1362  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1363  */
1364 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1365 	u64 mactime;
1366 	u64 boottime_ns;
1367 	u32 device_timestamp;
1368 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1369 	u32 flag;
1370 	u16 freq;
1371 	u8 enc_flags;
1372 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1373 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1374 	u8 rate_idx;
1375 	u8 nss;
1376 	u8 rx_flags;
1377 	u8 band;
1378 	u8 antenna;
1379 	s8 signal;
1380 	u8 chains;
1381 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1382 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1383 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1384 };
1385 
1386 /**
1387  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1388  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1389  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1390  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1391  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1392  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1393  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1394  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1395  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1396  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1397  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1398  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1399  *	@data field.
1400  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1401  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1402  *	length
1403  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1404  *
1405  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1406  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1407  * data.
1408  */
1409 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1410 	u32 present;
1411 	u8 align;
1412 	u8 oui[3];
1413 	u8 subns;
1414 	u8 pad;
1415 	u16 len;
1416 	u8 data[];
1417 } __packed;
1418 
1419 /**
1420  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1421  *
1422  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1423  *
1424  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1425  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1426  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1427  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1428  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1429  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1430  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1431  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1432  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1433  *	for more.
1434  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1435  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1436  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1437  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1438  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1439  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1440  *	operating channel.
1441  */
1442 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1443 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1444 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1445 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1446 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1447 };
1448 
1449 
1450 /**
1451  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1452  *
1453  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1454  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1455  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1456  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1457  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1458  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1459  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1460  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1461  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1462  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1463  */
1464 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1465 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1466 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1467 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1468 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1469 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1470 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1471 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1472 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1473 };
1474 
1475 /**
1476  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1477  *
1478  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1479  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1480  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1481  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1482  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1483  */
1484 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1485 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1486 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1487 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1488 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1489 
1490 	/* keep last */
1491 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1492 };
1493 
1494 /**
1495  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1496  *
1497  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1498  *
1499  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1500  *
1501  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1502  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1503  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1504  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1505  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1506  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1507  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1508  *
1509  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1510  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1511  *
1512  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1513  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1514  *
1515  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1516  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1517  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1518  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1519  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1520  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1521  *
1522  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1523  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1524  *	configured for an HT channel.
1525  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1526  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1527  */
1528 struct ieee80211_conf {
1529 	u32 flags;
1530 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1531 
1532 	u16 listen_interval;
1533 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1534 
1535 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1536 
1537 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1538 	bool radar_enabled;
1539 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1540 };
1541 
1542 /**
1543  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1544  *
1545  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1546  * operation.
1547  *
1548  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1549  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1550  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1551  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1552  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1553  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1554  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1555  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1556  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1557  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1558  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1559   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1560   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1561  */
1562 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1563 	u64 timestamp;
1564 	u32 device_timestamp;
1565 	bool block_tx;
1566 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1567 	u8 count;
1568 	u32 delay;
1569 };
1570 
1571 /**
1572  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1573  *
1574  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1575  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1576  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1577  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1578  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1579  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1580  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1581  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1582  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1583  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1584  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1585  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1586  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1587  */
1588 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1589 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1590 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1591 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1592 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1593 };
1594 
1595 /**
1596  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1597  *
1598  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1599  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1600  *
1601  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1602  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1603  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1604  * @addr: address of this interface
1605  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1606  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1607  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1608  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1609  *	for read access.
1610  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1611  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1612  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1613  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1614  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1615  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1616  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1617  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1618  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1619  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1620  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1621  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1622  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1623  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1624  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1625  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1626  *	interface.
1627  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1628  *	sizeof(void \*).
1629  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1630  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1631  *	protected by fq->lock.
1632  */
1633 struct ieee80211_vif {
1634 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1635 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1636 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1637 	bool p2p;
1638 	bool csa_active;
1639 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1640 
1641 	u8 cab_queue;
1642 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1643 
1644 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1645 
1646 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1647 
1648 	u32 driver_flags;
1649 
1650 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1651 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1652 #endif
1653 
1654 	unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1655 
1656 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1657 
1658 	/* must be last */
1659 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1660 };
1661 
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1662 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1663 {
1664 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1665 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1666 #endif
1667 	return false;
1668 }
1669 
1670 /**
1671  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1672  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1673  *
1674  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1675  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1676  *
1677  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1678  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1679  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1680  */
1681 struct ieee80211_vif *xrmac_wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1682 
1683 /**
1684  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1685  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1686  *
1687  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1688  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1689  *
1690  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1691  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1692  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1693  */
1694 struct wireless_dev *mac80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1695 
1696 /**
1697  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1698  *
1699  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1700  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1701  *
1702  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1703  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1704  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1705  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1706  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1707  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1708  *	generation in software.
1709  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1710  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1711  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1712  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1713  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1714  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1715  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1716  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1717  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1718  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1719  *	MIC.
1720  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1721  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1722  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1723  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1724  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1725  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1726  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1727  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1728  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1729  *	only for managment frames (MFP).
1730  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1731  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1732  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1733  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1734  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1735  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1736  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1737  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1738  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1739  *	generation only
1740  */
1741 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1742 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1743 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1744 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1745 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1746 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1747 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1748 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1749 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1750 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1751 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1752 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1753 };
1754 
1755 /**
1756  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1757  *
1758  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1759  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1760  *
1761  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1762  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1763  *	encrypted in hardware.
1764  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1765  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1766  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1767  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1768  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1769  * @keylen: key material length
1770  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1771  * 	data block:
1772  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1773  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1774  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1775  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1776  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1777  */
1778 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1779 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1780 	u32 cipher;
1781 	u8 icv_len;
1782 	u8 iv_len;
1783 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1784 	s8 keyidx;
1785 	u16 flags;
1786 	u8 keylen;
1787 	u8 key[0];
1788 };
1789 
1790 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1791 
1792 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1793 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1794 
1795 /**
1796  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1797  *
1798  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1799  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1800  *	reverse order than in packet)
1801  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1802  *	reverse order than in packet)
1803  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1804  *	reverse order than in packet)
1805  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1806  *	reverse order than in packet)
1807  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1808  */
1809 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1810 	union {
1811 		struct {
1812 			u32 iv32;
1813 			u16 iv16;
1814 		} tkip;
1815 		struct {
1816 			u8 pn[6];
1817 		} ccmp;
1818 		struct {
1819 			u8 pn[6];
1820 		} aes_cmac;
1821 		struct {
1822 			u8 pn[6];
1823 		} aes_gmac;
1824 		struct {
1825 			u8 pn[6];
1826 		} gcmp;
1827 		struct {
1828 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1829 			u8 seq_len;
1830 		} hw;
1831 	};
1832 };
1833 
1834 /**
1835  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1836  *
1837  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1838  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1839  *
1840  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1841  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1842  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1843  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1844  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1845  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1846  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1847  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1848  *     key_idx value calculation:
1849  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1850  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1851  */
1852 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1853 	u32 cipher;
1854 	u16 iftype;
1855 	u8 hdr_len;
1856 	u8 pn_len;
1857 	u8 pn_off;
1858 	u8 key_idx_off;
1859 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1860 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1861 	u8 mic_len;
1862 };
1863 
1864 /**
1865  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1866  *
1867  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1868  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1869  *
1870  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1871  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1872  */
1873 enum set_key_cmd {
1874 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1875 };
1876 
1877 /**
1878  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1879  *
1880  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1881  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1882  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1883  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1884  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1885  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1886  */
1887 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1888 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1889 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1890 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1891 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1892 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1893 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1894 };
1895 
1896 /**
1897  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1898  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1899  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1900  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1901  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1902  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1903  *
1904  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1905  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1906  */
1907 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1908 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1909 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1910 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1911 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1912 };
1913 
1914 /**
1915  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1916  *
1917  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1918  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1919  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1920  */
1921 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1922 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1923 	struct {
1924 		s8 idx;
1925 		u8 count;
1926 		u8 count_cts;
1927 		u8 count_rts;
1928 		u16 flags;
1929 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1930 };
1931 
1932 /**
1933  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1934  *
1935  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1936  *
1937  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1938  *	to the STA.
1939  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1940  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1941  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1942  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1943  *	per peer TPC.
1944  */
1945 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1946 	s16 power;
1947 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1948 };
1949 
1950 /**
1951  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1952  *
1953  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1954  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1955  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1956  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1957  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1958  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1959  *
1960  * @addr: MAC address
1961  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1962  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1963  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1964  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1965  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1966  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1967  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1968  *	Can be modified by driver.
1969  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1970  *	otherwise always false)
1971  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1972  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1973  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1974  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1975  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1976  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1977  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1978  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1979  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1980  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1981  *	the station moves to associated state.
1982  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1983  * @rates: rate control selection table
1984  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1985  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1986  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1987  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1988  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1989  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1990  *	unlimited.
1991  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1992  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1993  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1994  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1995  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1996  */
1997 struct ieee80211_sta {
1998 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1999 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2000 	u16 aid;
2001 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2002 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2003 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2004 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2005 	bool wme;
2006 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2007 	u8 max_sp;
2008 	u8 rx_nss;
2009 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2010 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2011 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2012 	bool tdls;
2013 	bool tdls_initiator;
2014 	bool mfp;
2015 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2016 
2017 	/**
2018 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2019 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2020 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2021 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2022 	 *
2023 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2024 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2025 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2026 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2027 	 *
2028 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2029 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2030 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2031 	 */
2032 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2033 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2034 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2035 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2036 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2037 
2038 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2039 
2040 	/* must be last */
2041 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2042 };
2043 
2044 /**
2045  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2046  *
2047  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2048  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2049  *
2050  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2051  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2052  */
2053 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2054 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2055 };
2056 
2057 /**
2058  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2059  *
2060  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2061  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2062  */
2063 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2064 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2065 };
2066 
2067 /**
2068  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2069  *
2070  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2071  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2072  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2073  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2074  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2075  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2076  *
2077  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2078  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2079  */
2080 struct ieee80211_txq {
2081 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2082 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2083 	u8 tid;
2084 	u8 ac;
2085 
2086 	/* must be last */
2087 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2088 };
2089 
2090 /**
2091  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2092  *
2093  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2094  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2095  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2096  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2097  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2098  *
2099  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2100  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2101  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2102  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2103  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2104  *	algorithm.
2105  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2106  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2107  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2108  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2109  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2110  *	CCK frames.
2111  *
2112  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2113  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2114  *	the FCS at the end.
2115  *
2116  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2117  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2118  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2119  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2120  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2121  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2122  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2123  *
2124  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2125  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2126  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2127  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2128  *
2129  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2130  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2131  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2132  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2133  *
2134  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2135  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2136  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2137  *
2138  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2139  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2140  *
2141  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2142  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2143  *
2144  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2145  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2146  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2147  *
2148  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2149  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2150  *
2151  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2152  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2153  *
2154  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2155  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2156  *	the stack.
2157  *
2158  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2159  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2160  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2161  *
2162  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2163  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2164  *	dtim_period).
2165  *
2166  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2167  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2168  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2169  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2170  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2171  *	only in that case.
2172  *
2173  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2174  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2175  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2176  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2177  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2178  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2179  *
2180  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2181  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2182  *	software.
2183  *
2184  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2185  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2186  *	active interfaces.
2187  *
2188  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2189  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2190  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2191  *
2192  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2193  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2194  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2195  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2196  *	supported cipher suites.
2197  *
2198  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2199  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2200  *	for frames.
2201  *
2202  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2203  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2204  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2205  *	control for more details.
2206  *
2207  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2208  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2209  *
2210  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2211  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2212  *	is supported.
2213  *
2214  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2215  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2216  *
2217  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2218  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2219  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2220  *
2221  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2222  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2223  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2224  *	CSA frame.
2225  *
2226  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2227  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2228  *
2229  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2230  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2231  *
2232  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2233  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2234  *
2235  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2236  *	within A-MPDU.
2237  *
2238  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2239  *	for sent beacons.
2240  *
2241  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2242  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2243  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2244  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2245  *
2246  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2247  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2248  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2249  *	timeout.
2250  *
2251  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2252  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2253  *
2254  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2255  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2256  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2257  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2258  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2259  *
2260  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2261  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2262  *
2263  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2264  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2265  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2266  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2267  *
2268  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2269  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2270  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2271  *
2272  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2273  *	TDLS links.
2274  *
2275  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2276  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2277  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2278  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2279  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2280  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2281  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2282  *
2283  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2284  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2285  *
2286  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2287  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2288  *
2289  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2290  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2291  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2292  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2293  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2294  *
2295  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2296  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2297  *	TXQs to start with.
2298  *
2299  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2300  *	length in tx status information
2301  *
2302  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2303  *
2304  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2305  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2306  *
2307  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2308  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2309  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2310  *
2311  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2312  */
2313 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2314 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2315 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2316 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2317 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2318 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2319 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2320 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2321 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2322 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2323 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2324 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2325 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2326 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2327 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2328 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2329 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2330 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2331 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2332 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2333 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2334 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2335 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2336 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2337 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2338 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2339 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2340 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2341 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2342 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2343 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2344 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2345 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2346 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2347 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2348 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2349 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2350 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2351 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2352 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2353 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2354 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2355 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2356 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2357 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2358 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2359 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2360 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2361 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2362 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2363 
2364 	/* keep last, obviously */
2365 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2366 };
2367 
2368 /**
2369  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2370  *
2371  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2372  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2373  *
2374  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2375  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2376  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2377  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2378  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2379  *
2380  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2381  *
2382  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2383  *	along with this structure.
2384  *
2385  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2386  *
2387  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2388  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2389  *
2390  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2391  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2392  *
2393  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2394  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2395  *
2396  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2397  *	that HW supports
2398  *
2399  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2400  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2401  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2402  *
2403  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2404  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2405  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2406  *
2407  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2408  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2409  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2410  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2411  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2412  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2413  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2414  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2415  *
2416  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2417  *	can handle.
2418  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2419  *	the hw can report back.
2420  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2421  *
2422  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2423  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2424  *	aggregation.
2425  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2426  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2427  *	it shouldn't be set.
2428  *
2429  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2430  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2431  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2432  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2433  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2434  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2435  *
2436  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2437  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2438  *
2439  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2440  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2441  *
2442  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2443  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2444  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2445  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2446  *
2447  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2448  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2449  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2450  *
2451  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2452  *
2453  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2454  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2455  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2456  *	device_timestamp.
2457  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2458  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2459  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2460  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2461  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2462  *
2463  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2464  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2465  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2466  *
2467  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2468  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2469  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2470  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2471  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2472  *	neither enabled.
2473  *
2474  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2475  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2476  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2477  *
2478  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2479  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2480  *	supported by HW.
2481  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2482  *	device.
2483  *
2484  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2485  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2486  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2487  *
2488  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2489  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2490  *
2491  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2492  */
2493 struct ieee80211_hw {
2494 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2495 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2496 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2497 	void *priv;
2498 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2499 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2500 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2501 	int vif_data_size;
2502 	int sta_data_size;
2503 	int chanctx_data_size;
2504 	int txq_data_size;
2505 	u16 queues;
2506 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2507 	s8 max_signal;
2508 	u8 max_rates;
2509 	u8 max_report_rates;
2510 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2511 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2512 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2513 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2514 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2515 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2516 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2517 	struct {
2518 		int units_pos;
2519 		s16 accuracy;
2520 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2521 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2522 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2523 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2524 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2525 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2526 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2527 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2528 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2529 	u32 max_mtu;
2530 };
2531 
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2532 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2533 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2534 {
2535 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2536 }
2537 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2538 
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2539 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2540 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2541 {
2542 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2543 }
2544 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2545 
2546 /**
2547  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2548  *
2549  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2550  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2551  */
2552 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2553 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2554 
2555 	/* Keep last */
2556 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2557 };
2558 
2559 /**
2560  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2561  *
2562  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2563  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2564  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2565  * @status: channel-switch response status
2566  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2567  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2568  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2569  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2570  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2571  */
2572 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2573 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2574 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2575 	u8 action_code;
2576 	u32 status;
2577 	u32 timestamp;
2578 	u16 switch_time;
2579 	u16 switch_timeout;
2580 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2581 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2582 };
2583 
2584 /**
2585  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2586  *
2587  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2588  *
2589  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2590  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2591  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2592  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2593  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2594  *
2595  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2596  */
2597 struct ieee80211_hw *xrmac_wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2598 
2599 /**
2600  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2601  *
2602  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2603  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2604  */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2605 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2606 {
2607 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2608 }
2609 
2610 /**
2611  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2612  *
2613  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2614  * @addr: the address to set
2615  */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2616 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2617 {
2618 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2619 }
2620 
2621 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2622 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2623 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2624 {
2625 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2626 		return NULL;
2627 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2628 }
2629 
2630 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2631 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2632 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2633 {
2634 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2635 		return NULL;
2636 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2637 }
2638 
2639 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2640 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2641 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2642 {
2643 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2644 		return NULL;
2645 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2646 }
2647 
2648 /**
2649  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2650  * @hw: the hardware
2651  * @skb: the skb
2652  *
2653  * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2654  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2655  */
2656 void mac80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2657 
2658 /**
2659  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2660  *
2661  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2662  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2663  *
2664  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2665  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2666  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2667  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2668  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2669  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2670  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2671  *
2672  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2673  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2674  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2675  *
2676  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2677  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2678  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2679  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2680  *
2681  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2682  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2683  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2684  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2685  *
2686  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2687  *
2688  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2689  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2690  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2691  * based on the receive flags.
2692  *
2693  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2694  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2695  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2696  * keys.
2697  *
2698  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2699  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2700  * handler.
2701  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2702  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2703  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2704  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2705  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2706  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2707  *
2708  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2709  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2710  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2711  *
2712  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2713  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2714  * requirements:
2715  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2716       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2717       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2718    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2719       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2720    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2721       encrypted with the new key and
2722    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2723    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2724  */
2725 
2726 /**
2727  * DOC: Powersave support
2728  *
2729  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2730  *
2731  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2732  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2733  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2734  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2735  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2736  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2737  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2738  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2739  *
2740  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2741  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2742  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2743  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2744  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2745  *
2746  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2747  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2748  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2749  *
2750  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2751  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2752  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2753  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2754  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2755  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2756  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2757  *
2758  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2759  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2760  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2761  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2762  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2763  * periods.
2764  *
2765  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2766  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2767  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2768  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2769  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2770  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2771  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2772  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2773  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2774  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2775  *
2776  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2777  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2778  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2779  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2780  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2781  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2782  *
2783  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2784  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2785  */
2786 
2787 /**
2788  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2789  *
2790  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2791  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2792  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2793  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2794  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2795  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2796  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2797  *
2798  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2799  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2800  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2801  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2802  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2803  *
2804  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2805  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2806  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2807  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2808  *
2809  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2810  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2811  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2812  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2813  *
2814  *  - a list of information element IDs
2815  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2816  *
2817  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2818  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2819  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2820  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2821  * vendor information elements.
2822  *
2823  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2824  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2825  *
2826  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2827  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2828  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2829  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2830  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2831  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2832  *
2833  *
2834  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2835  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2836  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2837  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2838  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2839  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2840  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2841  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2842  *
2843  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2844  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2845  * signal strength threshold checking.
2846  */
2847 
2848 /**
2849  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2850  *
2851  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2852  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2853  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2854  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2855  *
2856  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2857  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2858  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2859  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2860  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2861  * hardware flags.
2862  *
2863  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2864  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2865  * turned off otherwise.
2866  *
2867  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2868  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2869  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2870  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2871  */
2872 
2873 /**
2874  * DOC: Frame filtering
2875  *
2876  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2877  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2878  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2879  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2880  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2881  *
2882  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2883  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2884  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2885  *
2886  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2887  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2888  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2889  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2890  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2891  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2892  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2893  *
2894  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2895  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2896  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2897  * or dropped.
2898  *
2899  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2900  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2901  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2902  * the flag, but not clear it.
2903  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2904  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2905  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2906  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2907  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2908  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2909  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2910  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2911  */
2912 
2913 /**
2914  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2915  *
2916  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2917  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2918  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2919  *
2920  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2921  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2922  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2923  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2924  * the driver code.
2925  *
2926  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2927  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2928  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2929  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2930  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2931  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2932  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2933  *
2934  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2935  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2936  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2937  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2938  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2939  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2940  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2941  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2942  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2943  * @sta_notify callback.
2944  *
2945  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2946  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2947  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2948  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2949  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2950  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2951  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2952  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2953  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2954  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2955  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2956  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2957  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2958  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2959  *
2960  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2961  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2962  *
2963  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2964  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2965  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2966  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2967  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2968  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2969  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2970  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2971  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2972  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2973  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2974  *
2975  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2976  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2977  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2978  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2979  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2980  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2981  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2982  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2983  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2984  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2985  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2986  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2987  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2988  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2989  *
2990  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2991  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2992  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2993  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2994  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2995  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2996  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2997  *
2998  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2999  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3000  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3001  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3002  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3003  *
3004  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3005  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3006  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3007  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3008  */
3009 
3010 /**
3011  * DOC: HW queue control
3012  *
3013  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3014  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3015  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3016  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3017  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3018  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3019  *
3020  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3021  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3022  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3023  *
3024  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3025  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3026  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3027  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3028  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3029  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3030  * the hardware queue.
3031  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3032  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3033  *
3034  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3035  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3036  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3037  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3038  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3039  *
3040  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3041  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3042  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3043  * off-channel queue:         9
3044  *
3045  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3046  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3047  *
3048  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3049  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3050  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3051  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3052  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3053  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3054  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3055  *
3056  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3057  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3058  *
3059  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3060  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3061  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3062  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3063  */
3064 
3065 /**
3066  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3067  *
3068  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3069  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3070  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3071  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3072  *
3073  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3074  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3075  *	multicast address.
3076  *
3077  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3078  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3079  *
3080  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3081  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3082  *
3083  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3084  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3085  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3086  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3087  *	honour this flag if possible.
3088  *
3089  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3090  *	station
3091  *
3092  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3093  *
3094  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3095  *
3096  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3097  */
3098 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3099 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3100 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3101 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3102 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3103 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3104 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3105 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3106 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3107 };
3108 
3109 /**
3110  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3111  *
3112  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3113  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3114  *
3115  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3116  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3117  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3118  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3119  *
3120  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3121  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3122  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3123  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3124  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3125  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3126  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3127  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3128  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3129  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3130  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3131  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3132  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3133  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3134  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3135  */
3136 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3137 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3138 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3139 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3140 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3141 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3142 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3143 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3144 };
3145 
3146 /**
3147  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3148  *
3149  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3150  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3151  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3152  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3153  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3154  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3155  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3156  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3157  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3158  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3159  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3160  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3161  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3162  */
3163 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3164 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3165 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3166 	u16 tid;
3167 	u16 ssn;
3168 	u16 buf_size;
3169 	bool amsdu;
3170 	u16 timeout;
3171 };
3172 
3173 /**
3174  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3175  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3176  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3177  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3178  */
3179 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3180 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3181 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3182 };
3183 
3184 /**
3185  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3186  *
3187  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3188  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3189  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3190  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3191  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3192  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3193  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3194  *	the peer.
3195  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3196  *	by the peer
3197  */
3198 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3199 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3200 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3201 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3202 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3203 };
3204 
3205 /**
3206  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3207  *
3208  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3209  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3210  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3211  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3212  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3213  *
3214  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3215  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3216  *	for sending managment frames offchannel.
3217  */
3218 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3219 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3220 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3221 };
3222 
3223 /**
3224  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3225  *
3226  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3227  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3228  *
3229  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3230  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3231  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3232  *	of wowlan configuration)
3233  */
3234 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3235 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3236 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3237 };
3238 
3239 /**
3240  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3241  *
3242  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3243  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3244  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3245  *
3246  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3247  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3248  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3249  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3250  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3251  *	Must be atomic.
3252  *
3253  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3254  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3255  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3256  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3257  *	or zero.
3258  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3259  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3260  *	is added.
3261  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3262  *
3263  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3264  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3265  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3266  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3267  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3268  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3269  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3270  *
3271  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3272  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3273  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3274  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3275  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3276  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3277  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3278  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3279  *	must return 1 from this function.
3280  *
3281  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3282  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3283  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3284  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3285  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3286  *
3287  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3288  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3289  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3290  *	in suspend().
3291  *
3292  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3293  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3294  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3295  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3296  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3297  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3298  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3299  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3300  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3301  *
3302  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3303  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3304  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3305  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3306  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3307  *
3308  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3309  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3310  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3311  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3312  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3313  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3314  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3315  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3316  *
3317  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3318  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3319  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3320  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3321  *
3322  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3323  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3324  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3325  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3326  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3327  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3328  *	can sleep.
3329  *
3330  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3331  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3332  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3333  *
3334  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3335  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3336  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3337  *
3338  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3339  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3340  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3341  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3342  *	which flags are changed.
3343  *	This callback can sleep.
3344  *
3345  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3346  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3347  *
3348  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3349  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3350  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3351  *	is enabled.
3352  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3353  *	The callback can sleep.
3354  *
3355  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3356  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3357  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3358  *	The callback must be atomic.
3359  *
3360  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3361  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3362  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3363  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3364  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3365  *
3366  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3367  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3368  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3369  *
3370  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3371  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3372  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3373  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3374  *	that power save is disabled.
3375  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3376  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3377  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3378  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3379  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3380  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3381  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3382  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3383  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3384  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3385  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3386  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3387  *	The callback can sleep.
3388  *
3389  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3390  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3391  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3392  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3393  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3394  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3395  *	The callback can sleep.
3396  *
3397  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3398  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3399  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3400  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3401  *
3402  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3403  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3404  *
3405  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3406  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3407  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3408  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3409  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3410  *
3411  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3412  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3413  *	this notification.
3414  *	The callback can sleep.
3415  *
3416  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3417  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3418  *	The callback can sleep.
3419  *
3420  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3421  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3422  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3423  *	The callback must be atomic.
3424  *
3425  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3426  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3427  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3428  *	should be set as well.
3429  *	The callback can sleep.
3430  *
3431  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3432  *	The callback can sleep.
3433  *
3434  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3435  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3436  *
3437  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3438  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3439  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3440  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3441  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3442  *	This callback can sleep.
3443  *
3444  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3445  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3446  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3447  *	callback can sleep.
3448  *
3449  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3450  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3451  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3452  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3453  *
3454  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3455  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3456  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3457  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3458  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3459  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3460  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3461  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3462  *	The callback can sleep.
3463  *
3464  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3465  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3466  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3467  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3468  *	in @sta_state.
3469  *	The callback can sleep.
3470  *
3471  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3472  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3473  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3474  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3475  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3476  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3477  *	Must be atomic.
3478  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3479  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3480  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3481  *
3482  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3483  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3484  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3485  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3486  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3487  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3488  *	The callback can sleep.
3489  *
3490  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3491  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3492  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3493  *	The callback can sleep.
3494  *
3495  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3496  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3497  *	required function.
3498  *	The callback can sleep.
3499  *
3500  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3501  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3502  *	required function.
3503  *	The callback can sleep.
3504  *
3505  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3506  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3507  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3508  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3509  *	The callback can sleep.
3510  *
3511  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3512  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3513  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3514  *	TSF synchronization.
3515  *	The callback can sleep.
3516  *
3517  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3518  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3519  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3520  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3521  *	The callback can sleep.
3522  *
3523  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3524  *
3525  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3526  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3527  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3528  *	The callback can sleep.
3529  *
3530  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3531  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3532  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3533  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3534  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3535  *
3536  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3537  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3538  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3539  *
3540  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3541  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3542  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3543  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3544  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3545  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3546  *	The callback can sleep.
3547  *
3548  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3549  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3550  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3551  *	completion of the channel switch.
3552  *
3553  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3554  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3555  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3556  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3557  *
3558  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3559  *
3560  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3561  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3562  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3563  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3564  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3565  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3566  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3567  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3568  *	must be accepted in this case.
3569  *	This callback may sleep.
3570  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3571  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3572  *
3573  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3574  *
3575  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3576  *
3577  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3578  *	queues before entering power save.
3579  *
3580  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3581  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3582  *	The callback can sleep.
3583  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3584  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3585  *	The callback must be atomic.
3586  *
3587  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3588  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3589  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3590  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3591  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3592  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3593  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3594  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3595  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3596  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3597  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3598  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3599  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3600  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3601  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3602  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3603  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3604  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3605  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3606  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3607  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3608  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3609  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3610  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3611  *	This callback must be atomic.
3612  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3613  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3614  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3615  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3616  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3617  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3618  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3619  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3620  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3621  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3622  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3623  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3624  *	This callback must be atomic.
3625  *
3626  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3627  *
3628  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3629  *
3630  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3631  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3632  *
3633  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3634  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3635  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3636  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3637  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3638  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3639  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3640  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3641  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3642  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3643  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3644  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3645  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3646  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3647  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3648  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3649  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3650  *
3651  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3652  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3653  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3654  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3655  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3656  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3657  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3658  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3659  *
3660  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3661  *	This callback may sleep.
3662  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3663  *	This callback may sleep.
3664  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3665  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3666  *	channel context with different settings
3667  *	This callback may sleep.
3668  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3669  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3670  *	This callback may sleep.
3671  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3672  *	unbound from vif.
3673  *	This callback may sleep.
3674  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3675  *	another, as specified in the list of
3676  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3677  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3678  *	This callback may sleep.
3679  *
3680  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3681  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3682  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3683  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3684  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3685  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3686  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3687  *
3688  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3689  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3690  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3691  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3692  *	This callback may sleep.
3693  *
3694  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3695  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3696  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3697  *
3698  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3699  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3700  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3701  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3702  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3703  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3704  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3705  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3706  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3707  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3708  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3709  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3710  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3711  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3712  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3713  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3714  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3715  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3716  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3717  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3718  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3719  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3720  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3721  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3722  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3723  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3724  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3725  *
3726  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3727  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3728  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3729  *
3730  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3731  *	and hardware limits.
3732  *
3733  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3734  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3735  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3736  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3737  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3738  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3739  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3740  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3741  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3742  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3743  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3744  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3745  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3746  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3747  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3748  *	the function call.
3749  *
3750  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3751  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3752  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3753  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3754  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3755  *
3756  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3757  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3758  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3759  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3760  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3761  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3762  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3763  *	changed parameters.
3764  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3765  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3766  *	this call.
3767  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3768  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3769  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3770  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3771  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3772  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3773  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3774  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3775  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3776  *
3777  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3778  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3779  */
3780 struct ieee80211_ops {
3781 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3782 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3783 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3784 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3785 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3786 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3787 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3788 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3789 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3790 #endif
3791 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3792 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3793 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3794 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3795 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3796 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3797 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3798 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3799 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3800 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3801 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3802 				 u32 changed);
3803 
3804 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3805 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3806 
3807 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3808 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3809 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3810 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3811 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3812 				 u64 multicast);
3813 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3814 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3815 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3816 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3817 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3818 		       bool set);
3819 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3820 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3821 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3822 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3823 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3824 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3825 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3826 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3827 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3828 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3829 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3830 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3831 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3832 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3833 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3834 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3835 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3836 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3837 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3838 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3839 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3840 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3841 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3842 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3844 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3845 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3846 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3847 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3848 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3849 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3850 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3851 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3852 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3853 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3854 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3855 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3856 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3857 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3858 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3859 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3860 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3861 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3862 				struct dentry *dir);
3863 #endif
3864 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3865 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3866 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3867 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3868 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3869 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3870 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3871 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3872 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3873 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3874 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3875 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3876 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3877 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3878 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3879 			      u32 changed);
3880 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3881 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3882 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3883 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3884 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3885 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3886 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3887 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3888 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3889 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3890 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3891 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3892 			u64 tsf);
3893 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3894 			   s64 offset);
3895 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3896 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3897 
3898 	/**
3899 	 * @ampdu_action:
3900 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3901 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3902 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3903 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3904 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3905 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3906 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3907 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3908 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3909 	 *
3910 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3911 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3912 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3913 	 *
3914 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3915 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3916 	 *
3917 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3918 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3919 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3920 	 *
3921 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3922 	 *
3923 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3924 	 * The callback can sleep.
3925 	 */
3926 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3927 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3928 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3929 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3930 		struct survey_info *survey);
3931 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3932 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3933 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3934 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3935 			    void *data, int len);
3936 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3937 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3938 			     void *data, int len);
3939 #endif
3940 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3941 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3942 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3943 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3944 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3945 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3946 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3947 
3948 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3950 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3951 				 int duration,
3952 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3953 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3955 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3956 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3957 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3958 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3959 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3960 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3961 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3962 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3963 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3964 
3965 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3967 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3968 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3969 				      bool more_data);
3970 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3971 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3972 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
3973 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3974 					bool more_data);
3975 
3976 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3977 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3978 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3980 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3981 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3984 
3985 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3986 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3987 				  u16 duration);
3988 
3989 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3991 
3992 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3993 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3994 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3996 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3997 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3998 			       u32 changed);
3999 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4000 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4002 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4004 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4005 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4007 				  int n_vifs,
4008 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4009 
4010 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4012 
4013 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4014 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4015 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4016 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4017 #endif
4018 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4020 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4021 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4023 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4024 
4025 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4026 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4027 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4029 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4030 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4031 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4032 
4033 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4034 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4035 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4036 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4037 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4038 			   int *dbm);
4039 
4040 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4043 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4044 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4045 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4046 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4047 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4048 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4049 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4050 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4051 
4052 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4053 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4054 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4055 
4056 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4059 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4061 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4062 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4063 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4064 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4065 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4066 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4067 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4069 			    u8 instance_id);
4070 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4071 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4072 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4073 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4075 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4076 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4077 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4078 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4079 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4080 	int (*change_mac)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sockaddr *sa);
4081 };
4082 
4083 /**
4084  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4085  *
4086  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4087  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4088  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4089  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4090  * @priv_data_len.
4091  *
4092  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4093  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4094  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4095  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4096  *
4097  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4098  */
4099 struct ieee80211_hw *mac80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4100 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4101 					   const char *requested_name);
4102 
4103 /**
4104  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4105  *
4106  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4107  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4108  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4109  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4110  * @priv_data_len.
4111  *
4112  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4113  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4114  *
4115  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4116  */
4117 static inline
mac80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4118 struct ieee80211_hw *mac80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4119 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4120 {
4121 	return mac80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4122 }
4123 
4124 /**
4125  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4126  *
4127  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4128  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4129  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4130  *
4131  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4132  *
4133  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4134  */
4135 int mac80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4136 
4137 /**
4138  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4139  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4140  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4141  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4142  */
4143 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4144 	int throughput;
4145 	int blink_time;
4146 };
4147 
4148 /**
4149  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4150  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4151  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4152  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4153  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4154  */
4155 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4156 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4157 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4158 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4159 };
4160 
4161 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4162 const char *__mac80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4163 const char *__mac80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4164 const char *__mac80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4165 const char *__mac80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4166 const char *
4167 __mac80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4168 				   unsigned int flags,
4169 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4170 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4171 #endif
4172 /**
4173  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4174  *
4175  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4176  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4177  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4178  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4179  *
4180  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4181  *
4182  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4183  */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4184 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4185 {
4186 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4187 	return __mac80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4188 #else
4189 	return NULL;
4190 #endif
4191 }
4192 
4193 /**
4194  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4195  *
4196  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4197  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4198  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4199  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4200  *
4201  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4202  *
4203  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4204  */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4205 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4206 {
4207 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4208 	return __mac80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4209 #else
4210 	return NULL;
4211 #endif
4212 }
4213 
4214 /**
4215  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4216  *
4217  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4218  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4219  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4220  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4221  *
4222  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4223  *
4224  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4225  */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4226 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4227 {
4228 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4229 	return __mac80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4230 #else
4231 	return NULL;
4232 #endif
4233 }
4234 
4235 /**
4236  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4237  *
4238  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4239  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4240  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4241  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4242  *
4243  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4244  *
4245  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4246  */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4247 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4248 {
4249 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4250 	return __mac80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4251 #else
4252 	return NULL;
4253 #endif
4254 }
4255 
4256 /**
4257  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4258  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4259  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4260  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4261  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4262  *
4263  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4264  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4265  *
4266  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4267  */
4268 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4269 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4270 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4271 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4272 {
4273 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4274 	return __mac80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4275 						  blink_table_len);
4276 #else
4277 	return NULL;
4278 #endif
4279 }
4280 
4281 /**
4282  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4283  *
4284  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4285  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4286  *
4287  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4288  */
4289 void mac80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4290 
4291 /**
4292  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4293  *
4294  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4295  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4296  * before calling this function.
4297  *
4298  * @hw: the hardware to free
4299  */
4300 void mac80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4301 
4302 /**
4303  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4304  *
4305  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4306  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4307  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4308  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4309  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4310  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4311  *
4312  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4313  */
4314 void mac80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4315 int mac80211_ifdev_move(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4316 		struct device *new_parent, int dpm_order);
4317 
4318 /**
4319  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4320  *
4321  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4322  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4323  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4324  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4325  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4326  *
4327  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4328  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4329  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4330  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4331  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4332  *
4333  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4334  *
4335  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4336  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4337  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4338  * @napi: the NAPI context
4339  */
4340 void mac80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4341 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4342 
4343 /**
4344  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4345  *
4346  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4347  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4348  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4349  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4350  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4351  *
4352  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4353  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4354  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4355  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4356  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4357  *
4358  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4359  *
4360  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4361  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4362  */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4363 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4364 {
4365 	mac80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4366 }
4367 
4368 /**
4369  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4370  *
4371  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4372  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4373  *
4374  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4375  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4376  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4377  *
4378  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4379  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4380  */
4381 void mac80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4382 
4383 /**
4384  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4385  *
4386  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4387  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4388  *
4389  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4390  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4391  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4392  *
4393  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4394  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4395  */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4396 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4397 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4398 {
4399 	local_bh_disable();
4400 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4401 	local_bh_enable();
4402 }
4403 
4404 /**
4405  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4406  *
4407  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4408  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4409  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4410  *
4411  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4412  *
4413  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4414  * each other.
4415  *
4416  * @sta: currently connected sta
4417  * @start: start or stop PS
4418  *
4419  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4420  */
4421 int mac80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4422 
4423 /**
4424  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4425  *                                  (in process context)
4426  *
4427  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4428  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4429  * applies.
4430  *
4431  * @sta: currently connected sta
4432  * @start: start or stop PS
4433  *
4434  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4435  */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4436 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4437 						  bool start)
4438 {
4439 	int ret;
4440 
4441 	local_bh_disable();
4442 	ret = mac80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4443 	local_bh_enable();
4444 
4445 	return ret;
4446 }
4447 
4448 /**
4449  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4450  * @sta: currently connected station
4451  *
4452  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4453  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4454  * connected station was received.
4455  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4456  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4457  * be serialized.
4458  */
4459 void mac80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4460 
4461 /**
4462  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4463  * @sta: currently connected station
4464  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4465  *
4466  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4467  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4468  * from a connected station was received.
4469  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4470  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4471  * serialized.
4472  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4473  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4474  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4475  * checks.
4476  */
4477 void mac80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4478 
4479 /*
4480  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4481  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4482  */
4483 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4484 
4485 /**
4486  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4487  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4488  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4489  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4490  *
4491  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4492  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4493  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4494  *
4495  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4496  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4497  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4498  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4499  *
4500  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4501  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4502  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4503  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4504  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4505  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4506  *
4507  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4508  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4509  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4510  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4511  * use this API.
4512  */
4513 void mac80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4514 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4515 
4516 /**
4517  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4518  *
4519  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4520  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4521  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4522  *
4523  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4524  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4525  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4526  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4527  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4528  */
4529 void mac80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4530 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4531 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4532 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4533 			    int max_rates);
4534 
4535 /**
4536  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4537  *
4538  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4539  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4540  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4541  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4542  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4543  * slow stations to starve).
4544  *
4545  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4546  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4547  */
4548 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4549 					   u32 thr);
4550 
4551 /**
4552  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4553  *
4554  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4555  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4556  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4557  *
4558  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4559  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4560  * @info: tx status information
4561  */
4562 void mac80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4563 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4564 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4565 
4566 /**
4567  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4568  *
4569  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4570  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4571  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4572  *
4573  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4574  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4575  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4576  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4577  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4578  *
4579  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4580  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4581  */
4582 void mac80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4583 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4584 
4585 /**
4586  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4587  *
4588  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4589  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4590  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4591  *
4592  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4593  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4594  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4595  *
4596  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4597  * @status: tx status information
4598  */
4599 void mac80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4600 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4601 
4602 /**
4603  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4604  *
4605  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4606  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4607  * specific skbs.
4608  *
4609  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4610  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4611  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4612  *
4613  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4614  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4615  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4616  * @info: tx status information
4617  */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)4618 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4619 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4620 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4621 {
4622 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4623 		.sta = sta,
4624 		.info = info,
4625 	};
4626 
4627 	mac80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4628 }
4629 
4630 /**
4631  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4632  *
4633  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4634  *
4635  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4636  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4637  * for a single hardware.
4638  *
4639  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4640  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4641  */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4642 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4643 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4644 {
4645 	local_bh_disable();
4646 	mac80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4647 	local_bh_enable();
4648 }
4649 
4650 /**
4651  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4652  *
4653  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4654  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4655  *
4656  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4657  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4658  *
4659  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4660  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4661  */
4662 void mac80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4663 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4664 
4665 /**
4666  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4667  *
4668  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4669  * connected STA.
4670  *
4671  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4672  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4673  */
4674 void mac80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4675 
4676 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4677 
4678 /**
4679  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4680  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4681  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4682  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4683  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4684  *	should be ignored.
4685  */
4686 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4687 	u16 tim_offset;
4688 	u16 tim_length;
4689 
4690 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4691 };
4692 
4693 /**
4694  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4695  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4696  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4697  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4698  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4699  *
4700  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4701  * obtain the beacon template.
4702  *
4703  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4704  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4705  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4706  * applicable, the CSA count.
4707  *
4708  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4709  *
4710  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4711  */
4712 struct sk_buff *
4713 mac80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4714 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4715 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4716 
4717 /**
4718  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4719  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4720  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4721  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4722  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4723  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4724  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4725  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4726  *
4727  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4728  * obtain the beacon frame.
4729  *
4730  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4731  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4732  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4733  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4734  *
4735  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4736  *
4737  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4738  */
4739 struct sk_buff *mac80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4740 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4741 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4742 
4743 /**
4744  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4745  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4746  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4747  *
4748  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4749  *
4750  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4751  */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif)4752 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4753 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4754 {
4755 	return mac80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4756 }
4757 
4758 /**
4759  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4760  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4761  *
4762  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4763  * This function is called implicitly when
4764  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4765  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4766  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4767  *
4768  * Return: new csa counter value
4769  */
4770 u8 mac80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4771 
4772 /**
4773  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4774  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4775  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4776  *
4777  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4778  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4779  *
4780  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4781  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4782  */
4783 void mac80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4784 
4785 /**
4786  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4787  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4788  *
4789  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4790  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4791  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4792  */
4793 void mac80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4794 
4795 /**
4796  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4797  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4798  *
4799  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4800  */
4801 bool mac80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4802 
4803 
4804 /**
4805  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4806  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4807  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4808  *
4809  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4810  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4811  *
4812  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4813  *
4814  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4815  */
4816 struct sk_buff *mac80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4817 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4818 
4819 struct sk_buff *mac80211_proberesp_ext_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4820 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4821 
4822 
4823 /**
4824  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4825  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4826  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4827  *
4828  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4829  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4830  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4831  *
4832  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4833  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4834  *
4835  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4836  */
4837 struct sk_buff *mac80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4838 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4839 
4840 /**
4841  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4842  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4843  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4844  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4845  *	if at all possible
4846  *
4847  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4848  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4849  * BSSID and address is used.
4850  *
4851  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4852  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4853  *
4854  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4855  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4856  *
4857  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4858  */
4859 struct sk_buff *mac80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4860 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4861 				       bool qos_ok);
4862 
4863 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_qosnullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4864 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4865 
4866 /**
4867  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4868  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4869  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4870  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4871  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4872  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4873  *
4874  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4875  * hardware.
4876  *
4877  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4878  */
4879 struct sk_buff *mac80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4880 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4881 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4882 				       size_t tailroom);
4883 
4884 struct sk_buff *mac80211_probereq_data_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4885 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4886 					  const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4887 					  const u8 *ie, size_t ie_len);
4888 
4889 
4890 /**
4891  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4892  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4893  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4894  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4895  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4896  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4897  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4898  *
4899  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4900  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4901  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4902  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4903  */
4904 void mac80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4905 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4906 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4907 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4908 
4909 /**
4910  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4911  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4912  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4913  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4914  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4915  *
4916  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4917  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4918  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4919  *
4920  * Return: The duration.
4921  */
4922 __le16 mac80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4923 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4924 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4925 
4926 /**
4927  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4928  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4929  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4930  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4931  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4932  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4933  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4934  *
4935  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4936  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4937  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4938  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4939  */
4940 void mac80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4941 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4942 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4943 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4944 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4945 
4946 /**
4947  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4948  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4949  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4950  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4951  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4952  *
4953  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4954  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4955  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4956  *
4957  * Return: The duration.
4958  */
4959 __le16 mac80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4960 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4961 				    size_t frame_len,
4962 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4963 
4964 /**
4965  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4966  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4967  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4968  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4969  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4970  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4971  *
4972  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4973  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4974  *
4975  * Return: The duration.
4976  */
4977 __le16 mac80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4978 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4979 					enum nl80211_band band,
4980 					size_t frame_len,
4981 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4982 
4983 /**
4984  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4985  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4986  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4987  *
4988  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4989  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4990  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4991  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4992  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4993  *
4994  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4995  * frames are available.
4996  *
4997  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4998  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4999  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5000  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5001  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5002  * use common code for all beacons.
5003  */
5004 struct sk_buff *
5005 mac80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5006 
5007 /**
5008  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5009  *
5010  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5011  *
5012  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5013  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5014  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5015  */
5016 void mac80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5017 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5018 
5019 /**
5020  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5021  *
5022  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5023  * from the given packet.
5024  *
5025  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5026  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5027  *	with this P1K
5028  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5029  */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5030 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5031 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5032 {
5033 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5034 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5035 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5036 
5037 	mac80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5038 }
5039 
5040 /**
5041  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5042  *
5043  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5044  * and transmitter address.
5045  *
5046  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5047  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5048  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5049  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5050  */
5051 void mac80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5052 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5053 
5054 /**
5055  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5056  *
5057  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5058  * in the packet.
5059  *
5060  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5061  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5062  *	encrypted with this key
5063  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5064  */
5065 void mac80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5066 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5067 
5068 /**
5069  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5070  *
5071  * @pos: start of crypto header
5072  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5073  * @pn: PN to add
5074  *
5075  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5076  * the packet payload)
5077  *
5078  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5079  * point to the crypto header)
5080  */
5081 u8 *mac80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5082 
5083 /**
5084  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5085  *
5086  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5087  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5088  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5089  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5090  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5091  *
5092  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5093  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5094  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5095  *
5096  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5097  * can be done concurrently.
5098  */
5099 void mac80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5100 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5101 
5102 /**
5103  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5104  *
5105  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5106  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5107  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5108  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5109  * @seq: new sequence data
5110  *
5111  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5112  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5113  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5114  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5115  *
5116  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5117  * can be done concurrently.
5118  */
5119 void mac80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5120 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5121 
5122 /**
5123  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5124  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5125  *
5126  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5127  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5128  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5129  *
5130  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5131  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5132  */
5133 void mac80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5134 
5135 /**
5136  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5137  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5138  * @keyconf: new key data
5139  *
5140  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5141  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5142  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5143  *
5144  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5145  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5146  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5147  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5148  *
5149  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5150  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5151  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5152  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5153  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5154  * of the reconfiguration.
5155  *
5156  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5157  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5158  *
5159  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5160  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5161  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5162  * the key that's being replaced.
5163  */
5164 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5165 mac80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5166 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5167 
5168 /**
5169  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5170  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5171  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5172  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5173  * @gfp: allocation flags
5174  */
5175 void mac80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5176 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5177 
5178 /**
5179  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5180  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5181  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5182  *
5183  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5184  */
5185 void mac80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5186 
5187 /**
5188  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5189  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5190  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5191  *
5192  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5193  */
5194 void mac80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5195 
5196 /**
5197  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5198  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5199  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5200  *
5201  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5202  *
5203  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5204  */
5205 
5206 int mac80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5207 
5208 /**
5209  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5210  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5211  *
5212  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5213  */
5214 void mac80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5215 
5216 /**
5217  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5218  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5219  *
5220  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5221  */
5222 void mac80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5223 
5224 /**
5225  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5226  *
5227  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5228  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5229  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5230  * any context, including hardirq context.
5231  *
5232  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5233  * @info: information about the completed scan
5234  */
5235 void mac80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5236 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5237 
5238 /**
5239  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5240  *
5241  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5242  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5243  *
5244  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5245  */
5246 void mac80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5247 
5248 /**
5249  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5250  *
5251  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5252  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5253  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5254  * while associating, for instance.
5255  *
5256  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5257  */
5258 void mac80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5259 
5260 /**
5261  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5262  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5263  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5264  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5265  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5266  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5267  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5268  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5269  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5270  */
5271 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5272 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5273 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5274 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5275 };
5276 
5277 /**
5278  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5279  *
5280  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5281  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5282  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5283  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5284  *
5285  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5286  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5287  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5288  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5289  */
5290 void mac80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5291 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5292 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5293 				  void *data);
5294 
5295 /**
5296  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5297  *
5298  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5299  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5300  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5301  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5302  * be used.
5303  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5304  *
5305  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5306  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5307  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5308  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5309  */
5310 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5311 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5312 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5313 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5314 				    void *data)
5315 {
5316 	mac80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5317 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5318 				     iterator, data);
5319 }
5320 
5321 /**
5322  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5323  *
5324  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5325  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5326  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5327  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5328  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5329  *
5330  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5331  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5332  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5333  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5334  */
5335 void mac80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5336 						u32 iter_flags,
5337 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5338 						    u8 *mac,
5339 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5340 						void *data);
5341 
5342 /**
5343  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5344  *
5345  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5346  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5347  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5348  *
5349  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5350  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5351  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5352  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5353  */
5354 void mac80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5355 					      u32 iter_flags,
5356 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5357 						u8 *mac,
5358 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5359 					      void *data);
5360 
5361 /**
5362  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5363  *
5364  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5365  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5366  * function for them.
5367  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5368  *
5369  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5370  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5371  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5372  */
5373 void mac80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5374 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5375 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5376 				       void *data);
5377 /**
5378  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5379  *
5380  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5381  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5382  *
5383  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5384  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5385  */
5386 void mac80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5387 
5388 /**
5389  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5390  *
5391  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5392  * workqueue.
5393  *
5394  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5395  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5396  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5397  */
5398 void mac80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5399 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5400 				  unsigned long delay);
5401 
5402 /**
5403  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5404  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5405  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5406  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5407  *
5408  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5409  *
5410  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5411  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5412  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5413  */
5414 int mac80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5415 				  u16 timeout);
5416 
5417 /**
5418  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5419  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5420  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5421  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5422  *
5423  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5424  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5425  * from any context.
5426  */
5427 void mac80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5428 				      u16 tid);
5429 
5430 /**
5431  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5432  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5433  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5434  *
5435  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5436  *
5437  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5438  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5439  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5440  */
5441 int mac80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5442 
5443 /**
5444  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5445  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5446  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5447  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5448  *
5449  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5450  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5451  * can be called from any context.
5452  */
5453 void mac80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5454 				     u16 tid);
5455 
5456 /**
5457  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5458  *
5459  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5460  * @addr: station's address
5461  *
5462  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5463  *
5464  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5465  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5466  */
5467 struct ieee80211_sta *mac80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5468 					 const u8 *addr);
5469 
5470 /**
5471  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5472  *
5473  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5474  * @addr: remote station's address
5475  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5476  *
5477  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5478  *
5479  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5480  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5481  *
5482  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5483  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5484  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5485  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5486  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5487  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5488  *      is not reliable.
5489  *
5490  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5491  */
5492 struct ieee80211_sta *mac80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5493 					       const u8 *addr,
5494 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5495 
5496 /**
5497  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5498  * @hw: the hardware
5499  * @pubsta: the station
5500  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5501  *
5502  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5503  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5504  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5505  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5506  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5507  *
5508  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5509  * manner.
5510  *
5511  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5512  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5513  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5514  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5515  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5516  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5517  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5518  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5519  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5520  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5521  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5522  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5523  * woke up while blocked or not.
5524  */
5525 void mac80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5526 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5527 
5528 /**
5529  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5530  * @pubsta: the station
5531  *
5532  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5533  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5534  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5535  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5536  *
5537  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5538  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5539  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5540  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5541  *
5542  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5543  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5544  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5545  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5546  */
5547 void mac80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5548 
5549 /**
5550  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5551  * @pubsta: the station
5552  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5553  *
5554  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5555  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5556  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5557  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5558  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5559  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5560  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5561  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5562  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5563  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5564  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5565  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5566  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5567  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5568  */
5569 void mac80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5570 
5571 /**
5572  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5573  *
5574  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5575  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5576  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5577  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5578  *
5579  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5580  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5581  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5582  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5583  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5584  * attempts.
5585  *
5586  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5587  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5588  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5589  * them to 0.
5590  *
5591  * @pubsta: the station
5592  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5593  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5594  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5595  */
5596 void mac80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5597 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5598 
5599 /**
5600  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5601  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5602  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5603  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5604  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5605  *
5606  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5607  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5608  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5609  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5610  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5611  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5612  *
5613  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5614  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5615  * set_key callback.
5616  */
5617 void mac80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5618 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5619 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5620 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5621 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5622 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5623 				      void *data),
5624 			 void *iter_data);
5625 
5626 /**
5627  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5628  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5629  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5630  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5631  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5632  *
5633  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5634  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5635  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5636  * in removal process will be skipped.
5637  *
5638  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5639  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5640  */
5641 void mac80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5642 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5643 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5644 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5645 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5646 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5647 					  void *data),
5648 			     void *iter_data);
5649 
5650 /**
5651  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5652  * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5653  * @iter: iterator function
5654  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5655  *
5656  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5657  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5658  * places while calling into the driver.
5659  *
5660  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5661  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5662  * removed.
5663  *
5664  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5665  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5666  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5667  * or not.
5668  */
5669 void mac80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5670 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5671 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5672 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5673 		     void *data),
5674 	void *iter_data);
5675 
5676 /**
5677  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5678  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5679  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5680  *
5681  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5682  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5683  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5684  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5685  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5686  * %NULL.
5687  *
5688  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5689  */
5690 struct sk_buff *mac80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5691 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5692 
5693 /**
5694  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5695  *
5696  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5697  *
5698  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5699  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5700  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5701  */
5702 void mac80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5703 
5704 /**
5705  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5706  *
5707  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5708  *
5709  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5710  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5711  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5712  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5713  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5714  *
5715  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5716  * without connection recovery attempts.
5717  */
5718 void mac80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5719 
5720 /**
5721  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5722  *
5723  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5724  *
5725  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5726  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5727  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5728  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5729  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5730  *
5731  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5732  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5733  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5734  * disconnect normally later.
5735  *
5736  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5737  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5738  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5739  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5740  */
5741 void mac80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5742 
5743 /**
5744  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5745  *	rssi threshold triggered
5746  *
5747  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5748  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5749  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5750  * @gfp: context flags
5751  *
5752  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5753  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5754  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5755  */
5756 void mac80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5757 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5758 			       s32 rssi_level,
5759 			       gfp_t gfp);
5760 
5761 /**
5762  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5763  *
5764  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5765  * @gfp: context flags
5766  */
5767 void mac80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5768 
5769 /**
5770  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5771  *
5772  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5773  */
5774 void mac80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5775 
5776 /**
5777  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5778  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5779  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5780  *
5781  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5782  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5783  */
5784 void mac80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5785 
5786 /**
5787  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5788  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5789  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5790  *
5791  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5792  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5793  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5794  */
5795 void mac80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5796 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5797 
5798 /**
5799  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5800  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5801  */
5802 void mac80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5803 
5804 /**
5805  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5806  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5807  */
5808 void mac80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5809 
5810 /**
5811  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5812  *
5813  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5814  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5815  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5816  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5817  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5818  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5819  *
5820  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5821  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5822  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5823  */
5824 void mac80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5825 				  const u8 *addr);
5826 
5827 /**
5828  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5829  * @pubsta: station struct
5830  * @tid: the session's TID
5831  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5832  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5833  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5834  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5835  *
5836  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5837  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5838  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5839  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5840  */
5841 void mac80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5842 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5843 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5844 
5845 /**
5846  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5847  *
5848  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5849  * buffer.
5850  *
5851  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5852  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5853  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5854  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5855  */
5856 void mac80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5857 
5858 /**
5859  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5860  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5861  * @addr: station mac address
5862  * @tid: the rx tid
5863  */
5864 void mac80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5865 				 unsigned int tid);
5866 
5867 /**
5868  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5869  *
5870  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5871  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5872  * reordering.
5873  *
5874  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5875  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5876  *
5877  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5878  * @addr: station mac address
5879  * @tid: the rx tid
5880  */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)5881 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5882 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5883 {
5884 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5885 		return;
5886 	mac80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5887 }
5888 
5889 /**
5890  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5891  *
5892  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5893  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5894  * reordering.
5895  *
5896  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5897  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5898  *
5899  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5900  * @addr: station mac address
5901  * @tid: the rx tid
5902  */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)5903 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5904 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5905 {
5906 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5907 		return;
5908 	mac80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5909 }
5910 
5911 /**
5912  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5913  *
5914  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5915  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5916  *
5917  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5918  *
5919  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5920  * @addr: station mac address
5921  * @tid: the rx tid
5922  */
5923 void mac80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5924 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5925 
5926 /* Rate control API */
5927 
5928 /**
5929  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5930  *
5931  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5932  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5933  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5934  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5935  *	to be filled in
5936  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5937  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5938  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5939  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5940  *	RTS threshold
5941  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5942  *	if the selected rate supports it
5943  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5944  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5945  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5946  */
5947 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5948 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5949 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5950 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5951 	struct sk_buff *skb;
5952 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5953 	bool rts, short_preamble;
5954 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
5955 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5956 	bool bss;
5957 };
5958 
5959 /**
5960  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5961  */
5962 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5963 	/**
5964 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5965 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5966 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5967 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5968 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5969 	 */
5970 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5971 };
5972 
5973 struct rate_control_ops {
5974 	unsigned long capa;
5975 	const char *name;
5976 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5977 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
5978 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5979 	void (*free)(void *priv);
5980 
5981 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5982 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5983 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5984 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5985 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5986 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5987 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5988 			    u32 changed);
5989 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5990 			 void *priv_sta);
5991 
5992 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5993 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5994 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5995 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5996 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5997 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
5998 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5999 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6000 
6001 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6002 				struct dentry *dir);
6003 
6004 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6005 };
6006 
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6007 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6008 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6009 				 int index)
6010 {
6011 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6012 }
6013 
6014 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6015 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6016 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6017 {
6018 	int i;
6019 
6020 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6021 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6022 			return i;
6023 
6024 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6025 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6026 
6027 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6028 	return 0;
6029 }
6030 
6031 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6032 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6033 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6034 {
6035 	unsigned int i;
6036 
6037 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6038 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6039 			return true;
6040 	return false;
6041 }
6042 
6043 /**
6044  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6045  *
6046  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6047  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6048  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6049  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6050  *
6051  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6052  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6053  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6054  */
6055 int xrmac_rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6056 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6057 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6058 
6059 int mac80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6060 void mac80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6061 
6062 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6063 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6064 {
6065 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6066 }
6067 
6068 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6069 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6070 {
6071 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6072 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6073 }
6074 
6075 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6076 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6077 {
6078 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6079 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6080 }
6081 
6082 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6083 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6084 {
6085 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6086 }
6087 
6088 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6089 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6090 {
6091 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6092 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6093 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6094 }
6095 
6096 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6097 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6098 {
6099 	if (p2p) {
6100 		switch (type) {
6101 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6102 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6103 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6104 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6105 		default:
6106 			break;
6107 		}
6108 	}
6109 	return type;
6110 }
6111 
6112 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6113 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6114 {
6115 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6116 }
6117 
6118 /**
6119  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6120  *
6121  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6122  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6123  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6124  *
6125  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6126  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6127  * matching GroupId management frame.
6128  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6129  */
6130 void mac80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6131 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6132 
6133 void mac80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6134 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6135 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6136 
6137 void mac80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6138 
6139 /**
6140  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6141  *
6142  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6143  *
6144  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6145  *
6146  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6147  * applicable.
6148  */
6149 int mac80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6150 
6151 /**
6152  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6153  * @vif: virtual interface
6154  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6155  * @gfp: allocation flags
6156  *
6157  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6158  */
6159 void mac80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6160 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6161 				    gfp_t gfp);
6162 
6163 /**
6164  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6165  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6166  * @vif: virtual interface
6167  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6168  * @band: the band to transmit on
6169  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6170  *
6171  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6172  */
6173 bool mac80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6174 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6175 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6176 
6177 /**
6178  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6179  *
6180  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6181  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6182  *
6183  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6184  *
6185  * private:
6186  *
6187  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6188  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6189  */
6190 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6191 	u32 next_tsf;
6192 	bool has_next_tsf;
6193 
6194 	u8 absent;
6195 
6196 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6197 	struct {
6198 		u32 start;
6199 		u32 duration;
6200 		u32 interval;
6201 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6202 };
6203 
6204 /**
6205  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6206  *
6207  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6208  * @data: NoA tracking data
6209  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6210  *
6211  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6212  */
6213 int mac80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6214 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6215 
6216 /**
6217  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6218  *
6219  * @data: NoA tracking data
6220  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6221  */
6222 void mac80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6223 
6224 /**
6225  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6226  * @vif: virtual interface
6227  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6228  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6229  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6230  * @gfp: allocation flags
6231  *
6232  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6233  */
6234 void mac80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6235 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6236 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6237 
6238 /**
6239  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6240  *
6241  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6242  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6243  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6244  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6245  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6246  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6247  *
6248  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6249  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6250  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6251  *
6252  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6253  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6254  *
6255  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6256  */
6257 int mac80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6258 
6259 /**
6260  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6261  *
6262  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6263  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6264  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6265  *
6266  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6267  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6268  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6269  *
6270  * @sta: the station
6271  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6272  */
6273 void mac80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6274 
6275 /**
6276  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6277  *
6278  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6279  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6280  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6281  *
6282  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6283  *
6284  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6285  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6286  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6287  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6288  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6289  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6290  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6291  *
6292  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6293  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6294  */
6295 struct sk_buff *mac80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6296 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6297 
6298 /**
6299  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6300  * (in process context)
6301  *
6302  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6303  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6304  *
6305  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6306  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6307  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6308  */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6309 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6310 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6311 {
6312 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6313 
6314 	local_bh_disable();
6315 	skb = mac80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6316 	local_bh_enable();
6317 
6318 	return skb;
6319 }
6320 
6321 /**
6322  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6323  *
6324  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6325  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6326  *
6327  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6328  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6329  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6330  */
6331 struct ieee80211_txq *mac80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6332 
6333 /**
6334  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6335  *
6336  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6337  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6338  *
6339  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6340  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6341  */
6342 void mac80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6343 
6344 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6345 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6346 {
6347 }
6348 
6349 void __mac80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6350 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6351 
6352 /**
6353  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6354  *
6355  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6356  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6357  *
6358  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6359  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6360  *
6361  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6362  * this TXQ internally.
6363  */
6364 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6365 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6366 {
6367 	__mac80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6368 }
6369 
6370 /**
6371  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6372  *
6373  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6374  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6375  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6376  *
6377  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6378  * internally.
6379  */
6380 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)6381 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6382 		     bool force)
6383 {
6384 	__mac80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6385 }
6386 
6387 /**
6388  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6389  *
6390  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6391  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6392  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6393  * next_txq().
6394  *
6395  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6396  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6397  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6398  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6399  * again.
6400  *
6401  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6402  * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6403  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6404  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6405  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6406  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6407  *
6408  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6409  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6410  */
6411 bool mac80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6412 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6413 
6414 /**
6415  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6416  *
6417  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6418  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6419  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6420  *
6421  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6422  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6423  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6424  */
6425 void mac80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6426 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6427 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6428 
6429 /**
6430  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6431  *
6432  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6433  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6434  *
6435  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6436  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6437  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6438  * @gfp: allocation flags
6439  */
6440 void mac80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6441 				   u8 inst_id,
6442 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6443 				   gfp_t gfp);
6444 
6445 /**
6446  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6447  *
6448  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6449  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6450  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6451  *
6452  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6453  * @match: match event information
6454  * @gfp: allocation flags
6455  */
6456 void mac80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6457 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6458 			      gfp_t gfp);
6459 
6460 
6461 /*int mac80211_set_rts_thresholds(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);*/
6462 
6463 
6464 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6465